1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
/* vms.c -- Write out a VAX/VMS object file
|
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This file is part of GAS, the GNU Assembler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GAS is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
|
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
|
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
|
|
|
|
|
any later version.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GAS is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
|
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
|
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
|
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
|
|
|
along with GAS; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
|
|
|
|
|
the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Written by David L. Kashtan */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Modified by Eric Youngdale to write VMS debug records for program
|
|
|
|
|
variables */
|
|
|
|
|
#include "as.h"
|
|
|
|
|
#include "subsegs.h"
|
|
|
|
|
#include "obstack.h"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* What we do if there is a goof. */
|
|
|
|
|
#define error as_fatal
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HO_VMS /* These are of no use if we are cross assembling. */
|
|
|
|
|
#include <fab.h> /* Define File Access Block */
|
|
|
|
|
#include <nam.h> /* Define NAM Block */
|
|
|
|
|
#include <xab.h> /* Define XAB - all different types*/
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Version string of the compiler that produced the code we are
|
|
|
|
|
* assembling. (And this assembler, if we do not have compiler info.)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
extern const char version_string[];
|
|
|
|
|
char *compiler_version_string;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flag that determines how we map names. This takes several values, and
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
* is set with the -h switch. A value of zero implies names should be
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
* upper case, and the presence of the -h switch inhibits the case hack.
|
|
|
|
|
* No -h switch at all sets vms_name_mapping to 0, and allows case hacking.
|
|
|
|
|
* A value of 2 (set with -h2) implies names should be
|
|
|
|
|
* all lower case, with no case hack. A value of 3 (set with -h3) implies
|
|
|
|
|
* that case should be preserved. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the -+ switch is given, then the hash is appended to any name that is
|
|
|
|
|
* longer than 31 characters, irregardless of the setting of the -h switch.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
char vms_name_mapping = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char *strchr ();
|
|
|
|
|
extern char *myname;
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *Entry_Point_Symbol = 0; /* Pointer to "_main" */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We augment the "gas" symbol structure with this
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *Next;
|
|
|
|
|
struct symbol *Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *VMS_Symbols = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We need this to keep track of the various input files, so that we can
|
|
|
|
|
* give the debugger the correct source line.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *next;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *same_file_fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int file_number;
|
|
|
|
|
int max_line;
|
|
|
|
|
int min_line;
|
|
|
|
|
int offset;
|
|
|
|
|
char flag;
|
|
|
|
|
char *name;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *file_root = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *find_file (symbolS *);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This enum is used to keep track of the various types of variables that
|
|
|
|
|
* may be present.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
enum advanced_type
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
BASIC, POINTER, ARRAY, ENUM, STRUCT, UNION, FUNCTION, VOID, UNKNOWN
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This structure contains the information from the stabs directives, and the
|
|
|
|
|
* information is filled in by VMS_typedef_parse. Everything that is needed
|
|
|
|
|
* to generate the debugging record for a given symbol is present here.
|
|
|
|
|
* This could be done more efficiently, using nested struct/unions, but for now
|
|
|
|
|
* I am happy that it works.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *next;
|
|
|
|
|
enum advanced_type advanced; /* description of what this is */
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type; /* this record is for this type */
|
|
|
|
|
int type2; /* For advanced types this is the type referred to.
|
|
|
|
|
i.e. the type a pointer points to, or the type
|
|
|
|
|
of object that makes up an array */
|
|
|
|
|
int VMS_type; /* Use this type when generating a variable def */
|
|
|
|
|
int index_min; /* used for arrays - this will be present for all */
|
|
|
|
|
int index_max; /* entries, but will be meaningless for non-arrays */
|
|
|
|
|
int data_size; /* size in bytes of the data type. For an array, this
|
|
|
|
|
is the size of one element in the array */
|
|
|
|
|
int struc_numb; /* Number of the structure/union/enum - used for ref */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *VMS_Symbol_type_list =
|
|
|
|
|
{(struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We need this structure to keep track of forward references to
|
|
|
|
|
* struct/union/enum that have not been defined yet. When they are ultimately
|
|
|
|
|
* defined, then we can go back and generate the TIR commands to make a back
|
|
|
|
|
* reference.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *next;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
char resolved;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *f_ref_root =
|
|
|
|
|
{(struct forward_ref *) NULL};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This routine is used to compare the names of certain types to various
|
|
|
|
|
* fixed types that are known by the debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define type_check(x) !strcmp( symbol_name , x )
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This variable is used to keep track of the name of the symbol we are
|
|
|
|
|
* working on while we are parsing the stabs directives.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static char *symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We use this counter to assign numbers to all of the structures, unions
|
|
|
|
|
* and enums that we define. When we actually declare a variable to the
|
|
|
|
|
* debugger, we can simply do it by number, rather than describing the
|
|
|
|
|
* whole thing each time.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static structure_count = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This variable is used to keep track of the current structure number
|
|
|
|
|
* for a given variable. If this is < 0, that means that the structure
|
|
|
|
|
* has not yet been defined to the debugger. This is still cool, since
|
|
|
|
|
* the VMS object language has ways of fixing things up after the fact,
|
|
|
|
|
* so we just make a note of this, and generate fixups at the end.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int struct_number;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Variable descriptors are used tell the debugger the data types of certain
|
|
|
|
|
* more complicated variables (basically anything involving a structure,
|
|
|
|
|
* union, enum, array or pointer). Some non-pointer variables of the
|
|
|
|
|
* basic types that the debugger knows about do not require a variable
|
|
|
|
|
* descriptor.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Since it is impossible to have a variable descriptor longer than 128
|
|
|
|
|
* bytes by virtue of the way that the VMS object language is set up,
|
|
|
|
|
* it makes not sense to make the arrays any longer than this, or worrying
|
|
|
|
|
* about dynamic sizing of the array.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* These are the arrays and counters that we use to build a variable
|
|
|
|
|
* descriptor.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define MAX_DEBUG_RECORD 128
|
|
|
|
|
static char Local[MAX_DEBUG_RECORD]; /* buffer for variable descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
static char Asuffix[MAX_DEBUG_RECORD]; /* buffer for array descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Lpnt; /* index into Local */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Apoint; /* index into Asuffix */
|
|
|
|
|
static char overflow; /* flag to indicate we have written too much*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int total_len; /* used to calculate the total length of variable
|
|
|
|
|
descriptor plus array descriptor - used for len byte*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flag if we have told user about finding global constants in the text
|
|
|
|
|
section. */
|
|
|
|
|
static gave_compiler_message = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* A pointer to the current routine that we are working on. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* The psect number for $code a.k.a. the text section. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global data (Object records limited to 512 bytes by VAX-11 "C" runtime)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int VMS_Object_File_FD; /* File Descriptor for object file */
|
|
|
|
|
static char Object_Record_Buffer[512]; /* Buffer for object file records */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Object_Record_Offset;/* Offset to end of data */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Current_Object_Record_Type; /* Type of record in above */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Macros for placing data into the object record buffer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_LONG(val) \
|
|
|
|
|
{ md_number_to_chars(Object_Record_Buffer + \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset, val, 4); \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset += 4; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_SHORT(val) \
|
|
|
|
|
{ md_number_to_chars(Object_Record_Buffer + \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset, val, 2); \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset += 2; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_CHAR(val) Object_Record_Buffer[Object_Record_Offset++] = val
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_COUNTED_STRING(cp) {\
|
|
|
|
|
register char *p = cp; \
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR(strlen(p)); \
|
|
|
|
|
while (*p) PUT_CHAR(*p++);}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Macro for determining if a Name has psect attributes attached
|
|
|
|
|
* to it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING "$$PsectAttributes_"
|
|
|
|
|
#define PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH 18
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES(Name) \
|
|
|
|
|
(strncmp((Name[0] == '_' ? Name + 1 : Name), \
|
|
|
|
|
PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING, \
|
|
|
|
|
PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* in: segT out: N_TYPE bits */
|
|
|
|
|
const short seg_N_TYPE[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
N_ABS,
|
|
|
|
|
N_TEXT,
|
|
|
|
|
N_DATA,
|
|
|
|
|
N_BSS,
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* unknown */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* absent */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* pass1 */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* error */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* bignum/flonum */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* difference */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* debug */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* ntv */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* ptv */
|
|
|
|
|
N_REGISTER, /* register */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
const segT N_TYPE_seg[N_TYPE + 2] =
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* N_TYPE == 0x1E = 32-2 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_UNKNOWN, /* N_UNDF == 0 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_ABSOLUTE, /* N_ABS == 2 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_TEXT, /* N_TEXT == 4 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_DATA, /* N_DATA == 6 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_BSS, /* N_BSS == 8 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_REGISTER, /* dummy N_REGISTER for regs = 30 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* The following code defines the special types of pseudo-ops that we
|
|
|
|
|
* use with VMS.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
char const_flag = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
s_const ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register int temp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
temp = get_absolute_expression ();
|
|
|
|
|
subseg_new (SEG_DATA, (subsegT) temp);
|
|
|
|
|
const_flag = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* stab()
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Handle .stabX directives, which used to be open-coded.
|
|
|
|
|
* So much creeping featurism overloaded the semantics that we decided
|
|
|
|
|
* to put all .stabX thinking in one place. Here.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* We try to make any .stabX directive legal. Other people's AS will often
|
|
|
|
|
* do assembly-time consistency checks: eg assigning meaning to n_type bits
|
|
|
|
|
* and "protecting" you from setting them to certain values. (They also zero
|
|
|
|
|
* certain bits before emitting symbols. Tut tut.)
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* If an expression is not absolute we either gripe or use the relocation
|
|
|
|
|
* information. Other people's assemblers silently forget information they
|
|
|
|
|
* don't need and invent information they need that you didn't supply.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* .stabX directives always make a symbol table entry. It may be junk if
|
|
|
|
|
* the rest of your .stabX directive is malformed.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
obj_aout_stab (what)
|
|
|
|
|
int what;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *symbolP = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *string;
|
|
|
|
|
int saved_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int length;
|
|
|
|
|
int goof; /* TRUE if we have aborted. */
|
|
|
|
|
long longint;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Enter with input_line_pointer pointing past .stabX and any following
|
|
|
|
|
* whitespace.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
goof = 0; /* JF who forgot this?? */
|
|
|
|
|
if (what == 's')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
string = demand_copy_C_string (&length);
|
|
|
|
|
SKIP_WHITESPACE ();
|
|
|
|
|
if (*input_line_pointer == ',')
|
|
|
|
|
input_line_pointer++;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad ("I need a comma after symbol's name");
|
|
|
|
|
goof = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
string = "";
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Input_line_pointer->after ','. String->symbol name.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!goof)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = symbol_new (string,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_UNKNOWN,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
(struct frag *) 0);
|
|
|
|
|
switch (what)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 'd':
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_NAME (symbolP, NULL); /* .stabd feature. */
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_VALUE (symbolP, obstack_next_free (&frags) - frag_now->fr_literal);
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = frag_now;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case 'n':
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = &zero_address_frag;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case 's':
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = &zero_address_frag;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
BAD_CASE (what);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (get_absolute_expression_and_terminator (&longint) == ',')
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_symbol.n_type = saved_type = longint;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad ("I want a comma after the n_type expression");
|
|
|
|
|
goof = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
input_line_pointer--; /* Backup over a non-',' char. */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!goof)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (get_absolute_expression_and_terminator (&longint) == ',')
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_OTHER (symbolP, longint);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad ("I want a comma after the n_other expression");
|
|
|
|
|
goof = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
input_line_pointer--; /* Backup over a non-',' char. */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!goof)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_DESC (symbolP, get_absolute_expression ());
|
|
|
|
|
if (what == 's' || what == 'n')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*input_line_pointer != ',')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad ("I want a comma after the n_desc expression");
|
|
|
|
|
goof = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
input_line_pointer++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((!goof) && (what == 's' || what == 'n'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pseudo_set (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_symbol.n_type = saved_type;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (goof)
|
|
|
|
|
ignore_rest_of_line ();
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
|
|
|
|
|
} /* obj_aout_stab() */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
const pseudo_typeS obj_pseudo_table[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
{"stabd", obj_aout_stab, 'd'},/* stabs */
|
|
|
|
|
{"stabn", obj_aout_stab, 'n'},/* stabs */
|
|
|
|
|
{"stabs", obj_aout_stab, 's'},/* stabs */
|
|
|
|
|
{"const", s_const, 0},
|
|
|
|
|
{0, 0, 0},
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* obj_pseudo_table */
|
|
|
|
|
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
void
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
obj_read_begin_hook ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* obj_read_begin_hook() */
|
|
|
|
|
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
void
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
obj_crawl_symbol_chain (headers)
|
|
|
|
|
object_headers *headers;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS **symbolPP;
|
|
|
|
|
int symbol_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* JF deal with forward references first... */
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP->sy_forward)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_VALUE (symbolP, S_GET_VALUE (symbolP)
|
|
|
|
|
+ S_GET_VALUE (symbolP->sy_forward)
|
|
|
|
|
+ symbolP->sy_forward->sy_frag->fr_address);
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_forward = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if it has a forward reference */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* walk the symbol chain */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* crawl symbol table */
|
|
|
|
|
register int symbol_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolPP = &symbol_rootP; /* -> last symbol chain link. */
|
|
|
|
|
while ((symbolP = *symbolPP) != NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) += symbolP->sy_frag->fr_address;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* OK, here is how we decide which symbols go out into the
|
|
|
|
|
brave new symtab. Symbols that do are:
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
* symbols with no name (stabd's?)
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols with debug info in their N_TYPE
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
Symbols that don't are:
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols that are registers
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols with \1 as their 3rd character (numeric labels)
|
|
|
|
|
* "local labels" as defined by S_LOCAL_NAME(name)
|
|
|
|
|
if the -L switch was passed to gas.
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
All other symbols are output. We complain if a deleted
|
|
|
|
|
symbol was marked external. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_REGISTER (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_name_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolPP = &(symbol_next (symbolP));
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_EXTERNAL (symbolP) || !S_IS_DEFINED (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad ("Local symbol %s never defined", S_GET_NAME (symbolP));
|
|
|
|
|
} /* oops. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if this symbol should be in the output */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for each symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
H_SET_STRING_SIZE (headers, string_byte_count);
|
|
|
|
|
H_SET_SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE (headers, symbol_number);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* crawl symbol table */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
} /* obj_crawl_symbol_chain() */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/****** VMS OBJECT FILE HACKING ROUTINES *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Create the VMS object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Create_VMS_Object_File ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#if defined(eunice) || !defined(HO_VMS)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Object_File_FD = creat (out_file_name, 0777, "var");
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* eunice */
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
VMS_Object_File_FD = creat (out_file_name, 0, "rfm=var",
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
"mbc=16", "deq=64", "fop=tef", "shr=nil");
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* eunice */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with errors
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (VMS_Object_File_FD < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Error_Line[256];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (Error_Line, "Couldn't create VMS object file \"%s\"",
|
|
|
|
|
out_file_name);
|
|
|
|
|
error (Error_Line);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialize object file hacking variables
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Object_Record_Type = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the object record buffer to the object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
short int zero;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty, we are done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the data to the file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS /* For cross-assembly purposes. */
|
|
|
|
|
i = write (VMS_Object_File_FD, &Object_Record_Offset, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
i = write (VMS_Object_File_FD,
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Buffer,
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
if (i != Object_Record_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("I/O error writing VMS object file");
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS /* When cross-assembling, we need to pad the record to an even
|
|
|
|
|
number of bytes. */
|
|
|
|
|
/* pad it if needed */
|
|
|
|
|
zero = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset & 1 != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
write (VMS_Object_File_FD, &zero, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The buffer is now empty
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Declare a particular type of object file record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the type matches, we are done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Type == Current_Object_Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Otherwise: flush the buffer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the new type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Object_Record_Type = Type;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Close the VMS Object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Close_VMS_Object_File ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
short int m_one = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS /* For cross-assembly purposes. */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a 0xffff into the file, which means "End of File" */
|
|
|
|
|
write (VMS_Object_File_FD, &m_one, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
close (VMS_Object_File_FD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store immediate data in current Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Pointer, Size, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
register char *Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We can only store 128 bytes at a time
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (Size > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store a maximum of 128 bytes
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = (Size > 128) ? 128 : Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Size -= i;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we cannot accommodate this record, flush the
|
|
|
|
|
* buffer.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Object_Record_Offset + i + 1) >=
|
|
|
|
|
sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the count
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (-i & 0xff);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (--i >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*Pointer++);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a data reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Psect_Index, Offset, Record_Type, Force)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
int Force;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect base + Longword Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Force == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Index > 127)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset > 32767)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (Offset > 127)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPB);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set relocation base
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a debugger reference to a struct, union or enum.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (int Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "OBJ_S_C_DBG" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_STKDL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_L);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a debugger reference to partially define a struct, union or enum.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (int Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "OBJ_S_C_DBG" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_DFLOC);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (int Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* see previous functions for comments */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_STLOC);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Module Begin record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_Begin ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Module_Name[256];
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[256];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get module name (the FILENAME part of the object file)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = out_file_name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*cp == ']') || (*cp == '>') ||
|
|
|
|
|
(*cp == ':') || (*cp == '/'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1++ = islower (*cp) ? toupper (*cp++) : *cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Limit it to 31 characters
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (--cp1 >= Module_Name)
|
|
|
|
|
if (*cp1 == '.')
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (strlen (Module_Name) > 31)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (flagseen['+'])
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("%s: Module name truncated: %s\n", myname, Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Module_Name[31] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Arrange to store the data locally (leave room for size byte)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Begin module
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_MODBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Unused
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Language type == "C"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = DST_S_C_C;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the module name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = strlen (Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we can store the record size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Size = (cp - Local);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Put it into the object record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Module End record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_End ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[2];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End module
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_MODEND;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Put it into the object record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 2, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Routine Begin record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_Begin (symbolP, Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
struct symbol *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Strip the leading "_" from the name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name = S_GET_NAME (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the text psect offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Calculate the record size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Size = 1 + 1 + 4 + 1 + strlen (Name);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Record Size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Begin Routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_RTNBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Uses CallS/CallG
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data so far
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make sure we are still generating a OBJ_S_C_TBT record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now get the symbol address
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the counted string as data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
Size = strlen (cp1) + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Routine End record
|
|
|
|
|
* We *must* search the symbol table to find the next routine, since
|
|
|
|
|
* the assember has a way of reassembling the symbol table OUT OF ORDER
|
|
|
|
|
* Thus the next routine in the symbol list is not necessarily the
|
|
|
|
|
* next one in memory. For debugging to work correctly we must know the
|
|
|
|
|
* size of the routine.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (Max_Size, sp)
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size = 0x7fffffff;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[16];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) && S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*S_GET_NAME (symbolP) == 'L')
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) > S_GET_VALUE (sp)) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) < Size))
|
|
|
|
|
Size = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
/* check if gcc_compiled. has size of zero */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) == S_GET_VALUE (sp)) &&
|
|
|
|
|
sp != symbolP &&
|
|
|
|
|
(!strcmp (S_GET_NAME (sp), "gcc_compiled.") ||
|
|
|
|
|
!strcmp (S_GET_NAME (sp), "gcc2_compiled.")))
|
|
|
|
|
Size = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size == 0x7fffffff)
|
|
|
|
|
Size = Max_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Size -= S_GET_VALUE (sp); /* and get the size of the routine */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Record Size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 6;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End of Routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_RTNEND;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Unused
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size of routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*((long *) (Local + 3)) = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Block End record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_Begin (symbolP, Psect, Name)
|
|
|
|
|
struct symbol *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Begin block
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Size = 1 + 1 + 4 + 1 + strlen (Name);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Record Size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Begin Block - We simulate with a phony routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_BLKBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Uses CallS/CallG
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data so far
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make sure we are still generating a OBJ_S_C_DBG record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now get the symbol address
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the text psect offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the counted string as data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
Size = strlen (cp1) + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Block End record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_End (int Size)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[16];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End block - simulate with a phony end routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 6;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_BLKEND;
|
|
|
|
|
*((long *) (Local + 3)) = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Unused
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write a Line number / PC correlation record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (Line_Number, Offset, Psect, Do_Delta)
|
|
|
|
|
int Line_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Do_Delta;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[64];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If not delta, set our PC/Line number correlation
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Do_Delta == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1 + 1 + 2 + 1 + 4;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line Number/PC correlation
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set Line number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = DST_S_C_SET_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
*((unsigned short *) (Local + 3)) = Line_Number - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set PC
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[5] = DST_S_C_SET_ABS_PC;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 6, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make sure we are still generating a OBJ_S_C_TBT record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect < 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do a PC offset of 0 to register the line number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0; /* Increment PC by 0 and register line # */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If Delta is negative, terminate the line numbers
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Do_Delta < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1 + 1 + 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = DST_S_C_TERM_L;
|
|
|
|
|
*((long *) (Local + 3)) = Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do a PC/Line delta
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Line_Number > 1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to increment the line number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Line_Number - 1 <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_INCR_LINUM;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Line_Number - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_INCR_LINUM_W;
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = Line_Number - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Increment the PC
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset <= 128)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = -Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset < 0x10000)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_DELTA_PC_W;
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_DELTA_PC_L;
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = cp - (Local + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Describe a source file to the debugger
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_File (Filename, ID_Number)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Filename;
|
|
|
|
|
int ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Status, i;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS /* Used for cross-assembly */
|
|
|
|
|
i = strlen (Filename);
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
static struct FAB Fab;
|
|
|
|
|
static struct NAM Nam;
|
|
|
|
|
static struct XABDAT Date_Xab;
|
|
|
|
|
static struct XABFHC File_Header_Xab;
|
|
|
|
|
char Es_String[255], Rs_String[255];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Setup the Fab
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$b_bid = FAB$C_BID;
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$b_bln = sizeof (Fab);
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$l_nam = (&Nam);
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$l_xab = (char *) &Date_Xab;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Setup the Nam block so we can find out the FULL name
|
|
|
|
|
* of the source file.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$b_bid = NAM$C_BID;
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$b_bln = sizeof (Nam);
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$l_rsa = Rs_String;
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$b_rss = sizeof (Rs_String);
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$l_esa = Es_String;
|
|
|
|
|
Nam.nam$b_ess = sizeof (Es_String);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Setup the Date and File Header Xabs
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Date_Xab.xab$b_cod = XAB$C_DAT;
|
|
|
|
|
Date_Xab.xab$b_bln = sizeof (Date_Xab);
|
|
|
|
|
Date_Xab.xab$l_nxt = (char *) &File_Header_Xab;
|
|
|
|
|
File_Header_Xab.xab$b_cod = XAB$C_FHC;
|
|
|
|
|
File_Header_Xab.xab$b_bln = sizeof (File_Header_Xab);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the file information
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$l_fna = Filename;
|
|
|
|
|
Fab.fab$b_fns = strlen (Filename);
|
|
|
|
|
Status = sys$open (&Fab);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(Status & 1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gas: Couldn't find source file \"%s\", Error = %%X%x\n",
|
|
|
|
|
Filename, Status);
|
|
|
|
|
return (0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
sys$close (&Fab);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Calculate the size of the resultant string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = Nam.nam$b_rsl;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size of record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 2 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 + 1 + i + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Source declaration
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_SOURCE;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make formfeeds count as source records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = DST_S_C_SRC_FORMFEED;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Declare source file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[3] = DST_S_C_SRC_DECLFILE;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[4] = 1 + 2 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 + 1 + i + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local + 5;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flags
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* File ID
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Creation Date. Unknown, so we fill with zeroes.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End of file block
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* First free byte
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Record format
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Filename
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = i;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Filename;
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* Use this code when assembling for VMS on a VMS system */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Creation Date
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = ((long *) &Date_Xab.xab$q_cdt)[0];
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = ((long *) &Date_Xab.xab$q_cdt)[1];
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End of file block
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = File_Header_Xab.xab$l_ebk;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* First free byte
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = File_Header_Xab.xab$w_ffb;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Record format
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = File_Header_Xab.xab$b_rfo;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Filename
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = i;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Rs_String;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
while (--i >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Library module name (none)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Give the number of source lines to the debugger
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_Lines (ID_Number, Starting_Line_Number, Number_Of_Lines)
|
|
|
|
|
int ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Starting_Line_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Number_Of_Lines;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[16];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size of record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1 + 1 + 2 + 1 + 4 + 1 + 2;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Source declaration
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_SOURCE;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set Source File
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local + 2;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETFILE;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* File ID Number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set record number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETREC_L;
|
|
|
|
|
*(long *) cp = Starting_Line_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define lines
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_DEFLINES_W;
|
|
|
|
|
*(short *) cp = Number_Of_Lines;
|
|
|
|
|
cp += sizeof (short);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine locates a file in the list of files. If an entry does not
|
|
|
|
|
* exist, one is created. For include files, a new entry is always created
|
|
|
|
|
* such that inline functions can be properly debugged. */
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *
|
|
|
|
|
find_file (sp)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *same_file;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
same_file = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = file_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt == (struct input_file *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->spnt == sp)
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = file_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt == (struct input_file *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcmp (S_GET_NAME (sp), fpnt->name) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->flag == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
same_file = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = (struct input_file *) malloc (sizeof (struct input_file));
|
|
|
|
|
if (file_root == (struct input_file *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
file_root = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *fpnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt1 = file_root; fpnt1->next; fpnt1 = fpnt1->next) ;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt1->next = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->next = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->name = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->min_line = 0x7fffffff;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->max_line = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->flag = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->file_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->spnt = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->same_file_fpnt = same_file;
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The following functions and definitions are used to generate object records
|
|
|
|
|
* that will describe program variables to the VMS debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* This file contains many of the routines needed to output debugging info into
|
|
|
|
|
* the object file that the VMS debugger needs to understand symbols. These
|
|
|
|
|
* routines are called very late in the assembly process, and thus we can be
|
|
|
|
|
* fairly lax about changing things, since the GSD and the TIR sections have
|
|
|
|
|
* already been output.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine converts a number string into an integer, and stops when it
|
|
|
|
|
* sees an invalid character the return value is the address of the character
|
|
|
|
|
* just past the last character read. No error is generated.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
cvt_integer (str, rtn)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
int *rtn;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int ival, neg;
|
|
|
|
|
neg = *str == '-' ? ++str, -1 : 1;
|
|
|
|
|
ival = 0; /* first get the number of the type for dbx */
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*str <= '9') && (*str >= '0'))
|
|
|
|
|
ival = 10 * ival + *str++ - '0';
|
|
|
|
|
*rtn = neg * ival;
|
|
|
|
|
return str;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine fixes the names that are generated by C++, ".this" is a good
|
|
|
|
|
* example. The period does not work for the debugger, since it looks like
|
|
|
|
|
* the syntax for a structure element, and thus it gets mightily confused
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* We also use this to strip the PsectAttribute hack from the name before we
|
|
|
|
|
* write a debugger record */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
fix_name (pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Kill any leading "_"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is there a Psect Attribute to skip??
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (pnt))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Skip it
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt[0] == '$') && (pnt[1] == '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Here we fix the .this -> $this conversion */
|
|
|
|
|
for (pnt1 = pnt; *pnt1 != 0; pnt1++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt1 == '.')
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '$';
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* When defining a structure, this routine is called to find the name of
|
|
|
|
|
* the actual structure. It is assumed that str points to the equal sign
|
|
|
|
|
* in the definition, and it moves backward until it finds the start of the
|
|
|
|
|
* name. If it finds a 0, then it knows that this structure def is in the
|
|
|
|
|
* outermost level, and thus symbol_name points to the symbol name.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
get_struct_name (str)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt != ':') && (*pnt != '\0'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
return symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt-- = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt != ';') && (*pnt != '='))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == ';')
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt < '0') || (*pnt > '9'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt >= '0') && (*pnt <= '9'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* search symbol list for type number dbx_type. Return a pointer to struct */
|
|
|
|
|
static struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *
|
|
|
|
|
find_symbol (dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = VMS_Symbol_type_list;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt != (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->dbx_type == dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /*Dunno what this is*/
|
|
|
|
|
return spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine puts info into either Local or Asuffix, depending on the sign
|
|
|
|
|
* of size. The reason is that it is easier to build the variable descriptor
|
|
|
|
|
* backwards, while the array descriptor is best built forwards. In the end
|
|
|
|
|
* they get put together, if there is not a struct/union/enum along the way
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
push (value, size)
|
|
|
|
|
int value, size;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
int size1;
|
|
|
|
|
long int val;
|
|
|
|
|
val = value;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) &val;
|
|
|
|
|
size1 = size;
|
|
|
|
|
if (size < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
size1 = -size;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += size1 - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (size < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < size1; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt--] = *pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Lpnt < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < size1; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Asuffix[Apoint++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Apoint >= MAX_DEBUG_RECORD)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine generates the array descriptor for a given array */
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix (spnt2)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
int rank;
|
|
|
|
|
int total_size;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
rank = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt->advanced != ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
total_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
rank++;
|
|
|
|
|
total_size *= (spnt1->index_max - spnt1->index_min + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
total_size = total_size * spnt1->data_size;
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt1->data_size, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1->VMS_type == 0xa3)
|
|
|
|
|
push (0, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt1->VMS_type, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (4, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 6; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
push (0, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0xc0, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (rank, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_size, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt1->index_max - spnt1->index_min + 1, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt1->index_min, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt1->index_max, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine generates the start of a variable descriptor based upon
|
|
|
|
|
* a struct/union/enum that has yet to be defined. We define this spot as
|
|
|
|
|
* a new location, and save four bytes for the address. When the struct is
|
|
|
|
|
* finally defined, then we can go back and plug in the correct address
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = (struct forward_ref *) malloc (sizeof (struct forward_ref));
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->next = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
f_ref_root = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->dbx_type = dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'N';
|
|
|
|
|
push (3, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 5;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = -fpnt->struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine generates the variable descriptor used to describe non-basic
|
|
|
|
|
* variables. It calls itself recursively until it gets to the bottom of it
|
|
|
|
|
* all, and then builds the descriptor backwards. It is easiest to do it this
|
|
|
|
|
*way since we must periodically write length bytes, and it is easiest if we know
|
|
|
|
|
*the value when it is time to write it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
gen1 (spnt, array_suffix_len)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int array_suffix_len;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
switch (spnt->advanced)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case VOID:
|
|
|
|
|
push (DBG_S_C_VOID, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 1;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
case BASIC:
|
|
|
|
|
case FUNCTION:
|
|
|
|
|
if (array_suffix_len == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
push (spnt->VMS_type, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (DBG_S_C_BASIC, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
push (0, -4);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0xfa02, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = -2;
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case STRUCT:
|
|
|
|
|
case UNION:
|
|
|
|
|
case ENUM:
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = spnt->struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
push (DBG_S_C_STRUCT, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 5;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case POINTER:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
i = gen1 (spnt1, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
if (i)
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* (*void) is a special case, do not put pointer suffix*/
|
|
|
|
|
push (DBG_S_C_POINTER, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 3;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case ARRAY:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gcc-as warning(debugger output):");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("Forward reference error, dbx type %d\n",
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* It is too late to generate forward references, so the user gets a message.
|
|
|
|
|
* This should only happen on a compiler error */
|
|
|
|
|
i = gen1 (spnt1, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
i = Apoint;
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix (spnt);
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix_len = Apoint - i;
|
|
|
|
|
switch (spnt1->advanced)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case BASIC:
|
|
|
|
|
case FUNCTION:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
push (0, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0xfa, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0x0101, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
push (DBG_S_C_COMPLEX_ARRAY, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += array_suffix_len + 8;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This generates a suffix for a variable. If it is not a defined type yet,
|
|
|
|
|
* then dbx_type contains the type we are expecting so we can generate a
|
|
|
|
|
* forward reference. This calls gen1 to build most of the descriptor, and
|
|
|
|
|
* then it puts the icing on at the end. It then dumps whatever is needed
|
|
|
|
|
* to get a complete descriptor (i.e. struct reference, array suffix ).
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int ilen;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
char pvoid[6] =
|
|
|
|
|
{5, 0xaf, 0, 1, 0, 5};
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type != 0xa3)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no suffix needed */
|
|
|
|
|
gen1 (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
push (0x00af, -2);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
push (total_len, -1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* if the variable descriptor overflows the record, output a descriptor for
|
|
|
|
|
* a pointer to void.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((total_len >= MAX_DEBUG_RECORD) || overflow)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf (" Variable descriptor %d too complicated. Defined as *void ", spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (pvoid, 6, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (Lpnt < MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = Local[++Lpnt];
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = i;
|
|
|
|
|
/* we use this for a reference to a structure that has already been defined */
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (struct_number);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* we use this for a forward reference to a structure that has yet to be
|
|
|
|
|
*defined. We store four bytes of zero to make room for the actual address once
|
|
|
|
|
* it is known
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = -struct_number;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (struct_number);
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (i < Apoint)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = Asuffix[i++];
|
|
|
|
|
if (Lpnt != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates a symbol definition for a C sybmol for the debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
* It takes a psect and offset for global symbols - if psect < 0, then this is
|
|
|
|
|
* a local variable and the offset is relative to FP. In this case it can
|
|
|
|
|
* be either a variable (Offset < 0) or a parameter (Offset > 0).
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, Psect, Offset, Name)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name_pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int j;
|
|
|
|
|
int maxlen;
|
|
|
|
|
int i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Name_pnt = fix_name (Name); /* if there are bad characters in name, convert them */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* this is a local variable, referenced to SP */
|
|
|
|
|
maxlen = 7 + strlen (Name_pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = maxlen;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_FUNCTION_PARAMETER;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_LOCAL_SYM;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) &Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
for (j = 0; j < 4; j++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++; /* copy the offset */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
maxlen = 7 + strlen (Name_pnt); /* symbols fixed in memory */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + strlen (Name_pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Psect, Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (Name_pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*Name_pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *Name_pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses the stabs entries in order to make the definition
|
|
|
|
|
* for the debugger of local symbols and function parameters
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_local_stab_Parse (sp)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt++; /* save this for later, and skip colon */
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'c')
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* ignore static constants */
|
|
|
|
|
/* there is one little catch that we must be aware of. Sometimes function
|
|
|
|
|
* parameters are optimized into registers, and the compiler, in its infiite
|
|
|
|
|
* wisdom outputs stabs records for *both*. In general we want to use the
|
|
|
|
|
* register if it is present, so we must search the rest of the symbols for
|
|
|
|
|
* this function to see if this parameter is assigned to a register.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *str1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'p')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp1 = symbol_next (sp); sp1; sp1 = symbol_next (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp1) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char * pnt3=(char*) strchr (S_GET_NAME (sp1), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt3 == 'F' || *pnt3 == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp1) != N_RSYM)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
str1 = S_GET_NAME (sp1); /* and get the name */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != ':')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt2 != *str1)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
str1++;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*str1 != ':') || (*pnt2 != ':'))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* they are the same! lets skip this one */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
/* first find the dbx symbol type from list, and then find VMS type */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++; /* skip p in case no register */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* p block */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /*Dunno what this is*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, -1, S_GET_VALUE (sp), str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses a stabs entry to find the information required to define
|
|
|
|
|
* a variable. It is used for global and static variables.
|
|
|
|
|
* Basically we need to know the address of the symbol. With older versions
|
|
|
|
|
* of the compiler, const symbols are
|
|
|
|
|
* treated differently, in that if they are global they are written into the
|
|
|
|
|
* text psect. The global symbol entry for such a const is actually written
|
|
|
|
|
* as a program entry point (Yuk!!), so if we cannot find a symbol in the list
|
|
|
|
|
* of psects, we must search the entry points as well. static consts are even
|
|
|
|
|
* harder, since they are never assigned a memory address. The compiler passes
|
|
|
|
|
* a stab to tell us the value, but I am not sure what to do with it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, expected_type, type1, type2, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
char expected_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int type1, type2, Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == expected_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /*Dunno what this is*/
|
|
|
|
|
/* now we need to search the symbol table to find the psect and offset for
|
|
|
|
|
* this variable.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
while (vsp != (struct VMS_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = S_GET_NAME (vsp->Symbol);
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt != (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt++ == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
/* make sure name is the same, and make sure correct symbol type */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((strlen (pnt) == strlen (str)) && (strcmp (pnt, str) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
&& ((S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == type1) ||
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == type2)))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = vsp->Next;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp != (struct VMS_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, vsp->Psect_Index, vsp->Psect_Offset, str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* the symbol was not in the symbol list, but it may be an "entry point"
|
|
|
|
|
if it was a constant */
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp1 = symbol_rootP; sp1; sp1 = symbol_next (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp1) || (S_GET_TYPE (sp1) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = S_GET_NAME (sp1);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcmp (pnt, str) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!gave_compiler_message && expected_type == 'G')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("***Warning - the assembly code generated by the compiler has placed\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("global constant(s) in the text psect. These will not be available to\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("other modules, since this is not the correct way to handle this. You\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("have two options: 1) get a patched compiler that does not put global\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("constants in the text psect, or 2) remove the 'const' keyword from\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("definitions of global variables in your source module(s). Don't say\n");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("I didn't warn you!");
|
|
|
|
|
gave_compiler_message = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp1),
|
|
|
|
|
str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
*S_GET_NAME (sp1) = 'L';
|
|
|
|
|
/* fool assembler to not output this
|
|
|
|
|
* as a routine in the TBT */
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_GSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Global variables */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'G', (N_UNDF | N_EXT), (N_DATA | N_EXT), Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LCSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Static symbols - uninitialized */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'S', N_BSS, -1, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_STSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Static symbols - initialized */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'S', N_DATA, -1, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* for register symbols, we must figure out what range of addresses within the
|
|
|
|
|
* psect are valid. We will use the brackets in the stab directives to give us
|
|
|
|
|
* guidance as to the PC range that this variable is in scope. I am still not
|
|
|
|
|
* completely comfortable with this but as I learn more, I seem to get a better
|
|
|
|
|
* handle on what is going on.
|
|
|
|
|
* Caveat Emptor.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_RSYM_Parse (sp, Current_Routine, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp, *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int j;
|
|
|
|
|
int maxlen;
|
|
|
|
|
int i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int bcnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Min_Offset = -1; /* min PC of validity */
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Offset = 0; /* max PC of validity */
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = sp; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (bcnt++ == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Min_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (--bcnt == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset =
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Min_Offset != -1) && (bcnt == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt=(char*) strchr (S_GET_NAME (symbolP), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* check to see that the addresses were defined. If not, then there were no
|
|
|
|
|
* brackets in the function, and we must try to search for the next function
|
|
|
|
|
* Since functions can be in any order, we should search all of the symbol list
|
|
|
|
|
* to find the correct ending address. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Min_Offset == -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Source_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
Min_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
This_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
if ((This_Offset > Min_Offset) && (This_Offset < Max_Offset))
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset = This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
if (This_Offset > Max_Source_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Source_Offset = This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* if this is the last routine, then we use the PC of the last source line
|
|
|
|
|
* as a marker of the max PC for which this reg is valid */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Max_Offset == 0x7fffffff)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset = Max_Source_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt != 'r')
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /*Dunno what this is yet*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = fix_name (S_GET_NAME (sp)); /* if there are bad characters in name, convert them */
|
|
|
|
|
maxlen = 25 + strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = maxlen;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0xfb;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt) + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0xfd;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x0f;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x03;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x01;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Text_Psect, Min_Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Text_Psect, Max_Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x03;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this function examines a structure definition, checking all of the elements
|
|
|
|
|
* to make sure that all of them are fully defined. The only thing that we
|
|
|
|
|
* kick out are arrays of undefined structs, since we do not know how big
|
|
|
|
|
* they are. All others we can handle with a normal forward reference.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
forward_reference (pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == ';')
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no forward references */
|
|
|
|
|
do
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (i);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((spnt->advanced == POINTER) || (spnt->advanced == ARRAY))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
i = spnt->type2;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if ((spnt->advanced == ARRAY) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(spnt1 == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL))
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
} while (*++pnt != ';');
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no forward refences found */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses the stabs directives to find any definitions of dbx type
|
|
|
|
|
* numbers. It makes a note of all of them, creating a structure element
|
|
|
|
|
* of VMS_DBG_Symbol that describes it. This also generates the info for the
|
|
|
|
|
* debugger that describes the struct/union/enum, so that further references
|
|
|
|
|
* to these data types will be by number
|
|
|
|
|
* We have to process pointers right away, since there can be references
|
|
|
|
|
* to them later in the same stabs directive. We cannot have forward
|
|
|
|
|
* references to pointers, (but we can have a forward reference to a pointer to
|
|
|
|
|
* a structure/enum/union) and this is why we process them immediately.
|
|
|
|
|
* After we process the pointer, then we search for defs that are nested even
|
|
|
|
|
* deeper.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_typedef_parse (str)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
int dtype;
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int i1, i2, i3;
|
|
|
|
|
int convert_integer;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
/* check for any nested def's */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str + 1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt != (char *) NULL) && (*(str + 1) != '*'))
|
|
|
|
|
if (VMS_typedef_parse (pnt) == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/* now find dbx_type of entry */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'c')
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* check for static constants */
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0'; /* for now we ignore them */
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt <= '9') && (*pnt >= '0'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++; /* and get back to the number */
|
|
|
|
|
cvt_integer (pnt, &i1);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (i1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* first we see if this has been defined already, due to a forward reference*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (VMS_Symbol_type_list == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) malloc (sizeof (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol));
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->next = (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbol_type_list = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) malloc (sizeof (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol));
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->next = VMS_Symbol_type_list;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbol_type_list = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->dbx_type = i1; /* and save the type */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* for structs and unions, do a partial parse, otherwise we sometimes get
|
|
|
|
|
* circular definitions that are impossible to resolve. We read enough info
|
|
|
|
|
* so that any reference to this type has enough info to be resolved
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + 1; /* point to character past equal sign */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*pnt == 'u') || (*pnt == 's'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*pnt <= '9') && (*pnt >= '0'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("void"))
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* this is the void symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = VOID;
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("unknown type"))
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* this is the void symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = UNKNOWN;
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gcc-as warning(debugger output):");
|
|
|
|
|
printf (" %d is an unknown untyped variable.\n", spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* do not know what this is */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* now define this module*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + 1; /* point to character past equal sign */
|
|
|
|
|
switch (*pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 'r':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = BASIC;
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SLINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SLINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ULINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ULINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("short int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SSINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("short unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_USINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("signed char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("unsigned char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_UCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("float"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_REAL4;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("double"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_REAL8;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = (char *) strchr (str, ';') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 's':
|
|
|
|
|
case 'u':
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 's')
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = STRUCT;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = UNION;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->data_size);
|
|
|
|
|
if (forward_reference (pnt))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1--;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = get_struct_name (str);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (fpnt != (struct forward_ref *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->dbx_type == spnt->dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'Y';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (fpnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = fpnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 11 + strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_START;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x80;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i1 = 0; i1 < 4; i1++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
i2 = spnt->data_size * 8; /* number of bits */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) &i2;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i1 = 0; i1 < 4; i1++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt != symbol_name)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* replace colon for later */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*++pnt1 != ';')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt1, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &i2);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &i3);
|
|
|
|
|
if ((dtype == 1) && (i3 != 32))
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
push (19 + strlen (pnt2), 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0xfa22, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
push (1 + strlen (pnt2), 4);
|
|
|
|
|
push (strlen (pnt2), 1);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
push (*pnt2++, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
push (i3, 2); /* size of bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
push (0x0d22, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
push (0x00, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
push (i2, 4); /* start position */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Asuffix, Apoint, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + strlen (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
/* check if this is a forward reference */
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 != (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt1->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_ITEM;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) &i2;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i1 = 0; i1 < 4; i1++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 == (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt1, dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
else if (spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt1, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x01; /* length byte */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_END;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'e':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = ENUM;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (fpnt != (struct forward_ref *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->dbx_type == spnt->dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'Y';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (fpnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = fpnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 3 + strlen (symbol_name);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_START;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x20;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (symbol_name);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*++pnt != ';')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = (char *) strchr (pnt, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1++ = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1, &i1);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_ITEM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x00;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) &i1;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i2 = 0; i2 < 4; i2++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = pnt1; /* Skip final semicolon */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x01; /* len byte */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_END;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'a':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = ARRAY;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt, ';');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->index_min);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &spnt->index_max);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'f':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = FUNCTION;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_FUNCTION_ADDR;
|
|
|
|
|
/* this masquerades as a basic type*/
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case '*':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = POINTER;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str + 1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt != (char *) NULL))
|
|
|
|
|
if (VMS_typedef_parse (pnt) == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = UNKNOWN;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gcc-as warning(debugger output):");
|
|
|
|
|
printf (" %d is an unknown type of variable.\n", spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* unable to decipher */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/* this removes the evidence of the definition so that the outer levels of
|
|
|
|
|
parsing do not have to worry about it */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt1 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt++ = *pnt1++;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This is the root routine that parses the stabs entries for definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
* it calls VMS_typedef_parse, which can in turn call itself.
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to be careful, since sometimes there are forward references to
|
|
|
|
|
* other symbol types, and these cannot be resolved until we have completed
|
|
|
|
|
* the parse.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LSYM_Parse ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
char fixit[10];
|
|
|
|
|
int incomplete, i, pass, incom1;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
pass = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
do
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
incom1 = incomplete;
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_GSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LCSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_STSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_PSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_FUN: /*sometimes these contain typedefs*/
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_name = str;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) strchr (pnt1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt2 == (char *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = ':'; /* replace colon */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* no symbol here */
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete += VMS_typedef_parse (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = ':'; /* put back colon so variable def code finds dbx_type*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
} /*for*/
|
|
|
|
|
pass++;
|
|
|
|
|
} while ((incomplete != 0) && (incomplete != incom1));
|
|
|
|
|
/* repeat until all refs resolved if possible */
|
|
|
|
|
/* if (pass > 1) printf(" Required %d passes\n",pass);*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (incomplete != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gcc-as warning(debugger output):");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("Unable to resolve %d circular references.\n", incomplete);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_name = "\0";
|
|
|
|
|
while (fpnt != (struct forward_ref *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->resolved != 'Y')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (find_symbol (fpnt->dbx_type) !=
|
|
|
|
|
(struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("gcc-as warning(debugger output):");
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("Forward reference error, dbx type %d\n",
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fixit[0] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (&fixit[1], "%d=s4;", fpnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) strchr (&fixit[1], '=');
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_typedef_parse (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = fpnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (s1, s2)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s1, *s2;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP1 = symbol_next (s1); symbolP1 != s2; symbolP1 = symbol_next (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP1 == (symbolS *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP1) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char * pnt=(char*) strchr (S_GET_NAME (symbolP1), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_PSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_local_stab_Parse (symbolP1);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_RSYM_Parse (symbolP1, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This function crawls the symbol chain searching for local symbols that need
|
|
|
|
|
* to be described to the debugger. When we enter a new scope with a "{", it
|
|
|
|
|
* creates a new "block", which helps the debugger keep track of which scope
|
|
|
|
|
* we are currently in.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Routine (symbolP, Level)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Level;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sstart;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
char str[10];
|
|
|
|
|
int rcount = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
sstart = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP1 = symbol_next (symbolP); symbolP1; symbolP1 = symbol_next (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP1) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char * pnt=(char*) strchr (S_GET_NAME (symbolP1), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (Level != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (str, "$%d", rcount++);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_Begin (symbolP1, Text_Psect, str);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP1);
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (sstart, symbolP1);
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP1 =
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Routine (symbolP1, Level + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Level != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_End (S_GET_VALUE (symbolP1) -
|
|
|
|
|
Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
sstart = symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
return symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
/* we end up here if there were no brackets in this function. Define
|
|
|
|
|
everything */
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (sstart, (symbolS *) 0);
|
|
|
|
|
return symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_Define_Routine (symbolP, Curr_Routine, Txt_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Curr_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
int Txt_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Routine = Curr_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect = Txt_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Routine (symbolP, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS
|
|
|
|
|
#include <sys/types.h>
|
|
|
|
|
#include <time.h>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Manufacure a VMS like time on a unix based system. */
|
|
|
|
|
get_VMS_time_on_unix (char *Now)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
time_t timeb;
|
|
|
|
|
time (&timeb);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = ctime (&timeb);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[3] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[7] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[10] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[16] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[24] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (Now, "%2s-%3s-%s %s", pnt + 8, pnt + 4, pnt + 20, pnt + 11);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the MHD (Module Header) records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_MHD_Records ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
struct
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Ptr;
|
|
|
|
|
} Descriptor;
|
|
|
|
|
char Module_Name[256];
|
|
|
|
|
char Now[18];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a module header record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* ***************************
|
|
|
|
|
* *MAIN MODULE HEADER RECORD*
|
|
|
|
|
* ***************************
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store record type and header type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (MHD_S_C_MHD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Structure level is 0
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_STRLVL);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Maximum record size is size of the object record buffer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer));
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get module name (the FILENAME part of the object file)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = out_file_name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*cp == ']') || (*cp == '>') ||
|
|
|
|
|
(*cp == ':') || (*cp == '/'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1++ = islower (*cp) ? toupper (*cp++) : *cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Limit it to 31 characters and store in the object record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (--cp1 >= Module_Name)
|
|
|
|
|
if (*cp1 == '.')
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (strlen (Module_Name) > 31)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (flagseen['+'])
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("%s: Module name truncated: %s\n", myname, Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Module_Name[31] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Module Version is "V1.0"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING ("V1.0");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Creation time is "now" (17 chars of time string)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef HO_VMS
|
|
|
|
|
get_VMS_time_on_unix (&Now[0]);
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
Descriptor.Size = 17;
|
|
|
|
|
Descriptor.Ptr = Now;
|
|
|
|
|
sys$asctim (0, &Descriptor, 0, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HO_VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Now[i]);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Patch time is "never" (17 zeros)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* *************************
|
|
|
|
|
* *LANGUAGE PROCESSOR NAME*
|
|
|
|
|
* *************************
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store record type and header type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (MHD_S_C_LNM);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store language processor name and version
|
|
|
|
|
* (not a counted string!)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = compiler_version_string;
|
|
|
|
|
if (cp == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
cp = "GNU AS V";
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*cp++);
|
|
|
|
|
cp = strchr (&version_string, '.');
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp != ' ')
|
|
|
|
|
cp--;
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp >= 32)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*cp++);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the EOM (End Of Module) record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (Psect, Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing an end-of-module record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_EOM);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store record Type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_EOM);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the error severity (0)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the entry point, if it exists
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the entry point Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the entry point Psect offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this hash routine borrowed from GNU-EMACS, and strengthened slightly ERY*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
hash_string (ptr)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned char *ptr;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register unsigned char *p = ptr;
|
|
|
|
|
register unsigned char *end = p + strlen (ptr);
|
|
|
|
|
register unsigned char c;
|
|
|
|
|
register int hash = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (p != end)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
c = *p++;
|
|
|
|
|
hash = ((hash << 3) + (hash << 15) + (hash >> 28) + c);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return hash;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate a Case-Hacked VMS symbol name (limited to 31 chars)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (In, Out)
|
|
|
|
|
register char *In;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *Out;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
long int init = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
long int result;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *new_name;
|
|
|
|
|
char *old_name;
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
int destructor = 0; /*hack to allow for case sens in a destructor*/
|
|
|
|
|
int truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Case_Hack_Bits = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Saw_Dollar = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
static char Hex_Table[16] =
|
|
|
|
|
{'0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Kill any leading "_"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '_') && ((In[1] > '9') || (In[1] < '0')))
|
|
|
|
|
In++;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
new_name = Out; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if barfoo /* Dead code */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '_') && (In[1] == '$') && (In[2] == '_'))
|
|
|
|
|
destructor = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We may need to truncate the symbol, save the hash for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (strlen (In) > 23)
|
|
|
|
|
result = hash_string (In);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is there a Psect Attribute to skip??
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (In))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Skip it
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
In += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*In)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '$') && (In[1] == '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
In += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
old_name = In;
|
|
|
|
|
/* if (strlen(In) > 31 && flagseen['+'])
|
|
|
|
|
printf("%s: Symbol name truncated: %s\n",myname,In);*/
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do the case conversion
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = 23; /* Maximum of 23 chars */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*In && (--i >= 0))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits <<= 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*In == '$')
|
|
|
|
|
Saw_Dollar = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((destructor == 1) && (i == 21))
|
|
|
|
|
Saw_Dollar = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
switch (vms_name_mapping)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 0:
|
|
|
|
|
if (isupper(*In)) {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits |= 1;
|
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = islower(*In) ? toupper(*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 3: *Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 2:
|
|
|
|
|
if (islower(*In)) {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = isupper(*In) ? tolower(*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we saw a dollar sign, we don't do case hacking
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (flagseen['h'] || Saw_Dollar)
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we have more than 23 characters and everything is lowercase
|
|
|
|
|
* we can insert the full 31 characters
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*In)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We have more than 23 characters
|
|
|
|
|
* If we must add the case hack, then we have truncated the str
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = Out;
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Case_Hack_Bits == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And so far they are all lower case:
|
|
|
|
|
* Check up to 8 more characters
|
|
|
|
|
* and ensure that they are lowercase
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; (In[i] != 0) && (i < 8); i++)
|
|
|
|
|
if (isupper(In[i]) && !Saw_Dollar && !flagseen['h'])
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (In[i] == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((i == 8) || (In[i] == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* They are: Copy up to 31 characters
|
|
|
|
|
* to the output string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((--i >= 0) && (*In))
|
|
|
|
|
switch (vms_name_mapping){
|
|
|
|
|
case 0: *Out++ = islower(*In) ?
|
|
|
|
|
toupper (*In++) :
|
|
|
|
|
*In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 3: *Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 2: *Out++ = isupper(*In) ?
|
|
|
|
|
tolower(*In++) :
|
|
|
|
|
*In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there were any uppercase characters in the name we
|
|
|
|
|
* take on the case hacking string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Old behavior for regular GNU-C compiler */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!flagseen['+'])
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Case_Hack_Bits != 0) || (truncate == 1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (truncate == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = '_';
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 6; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = Hex_Table[Case_Hack_Bits & 0xf];
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits >>= 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = 'X';
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Out = pnt; /*Cut back to 23 characters maximum */
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = '_';
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 7; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
init = result & 0x01f;
|
|
|
|
|
if (init < 10)
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = '0' + init;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = 'A' + init - 10;
|
|
|
|
|
result = result >> 5;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
} /*Case Hack */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*Out = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (truncate == 1 && flagseen['+'] && flagseen['H'])
|
|
|
|
|
printf ("%s: Symbol %s replaced by %s\n", myname, old_name, new_name);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan a symbol name for a psect attribute specification
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT 0x10000
|
|
|
|
|
#define GLOBALVALUE_BIT 0x20000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (Name, Attribute_Pointer)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int *Attribute_Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Negate;
|
|
|
|
|
static struct
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Value;
|
|
|
|
|
} Attributes[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
{"PIC", GPS_S_M_PIC},
|
|
|
|
|
{"LIB", GPS_S_M_LIB},
|
|
|
|
|
{"OVR", GPS_S_M_OVR},
|
|
|
|
|
{"REL", GPS_S_M_REL},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GBL", GPS_S_M_GBL},
|
|
|
|
|
{"SHR", GPS_S_M_SHR},
|
|
|
|
|
{"EXE", GPS_S_M_EXE},
|
|
|
|
|
{"RD", GPS_S_M_RD},
|
|
|
|
|
{"WRT", GPS_S_M_WRT},
|
|
|
|
|
{"VEC", GPS_S_M_VEC},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GLOBALSYMBOL", GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GLOBALVALUE", GLOBALVALUE_BIT},
|
|
|
|
|
{0, 0}
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Kill leading "_"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for a PSECT attribute list
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* If not, return */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Skip the attribute list indicator
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Process the attributes ("_" separated, "$" terminated)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (*Name != '$')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Assume not negating
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Negate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for "NO"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Name[0] == 'N') && (Name[1] == 'O'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are negating (and skip the NO)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Negate = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Name += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Find the token delimiter
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp && (*cp != '_') && (*cp != '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for the token in the attribute list
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; Attributes[i].Name; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the strings match, set/clear the attr.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (strncmp (Name, Attributes[i].Name, cp - Name) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set or clear
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Negate)
|
|
|
|
|
*Attribute_Pointer &=
|
|
|
|
|
~Attributes[i].Value;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
*Attribute_Pointer |=
|
|
|
|
|
Attributes[i].Value;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now skip the attribute
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name = cp;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a global symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, Psect_Number, Psect_Offset, Defined)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a Global symbol definition subrecord
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_SYM);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_SYMW);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Data type is undefined
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Switch on Definition/Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Defined & 1) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Definition:
|
|
|
|
|
* Flags = "RELOCATABLE" and "DEFINED" for regular symbol
|
|
|
|
|
* = "DEFINED" for globalvalue (Defined & 2 == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Defined & 2) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (GSY_S_M_DEF | GSY_S_M_REL);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (GSY_S_M_DEF);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psect Number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Psect_Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Reference:
|
|
|
|
|
* Flags = "RELOCATABLE" for regular symbol,
|
|
|
|
|
* = "" for globalvalue (Defined & 2 == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Defined & 2) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (GSY_S_M_REL);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (0);
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the global symbol name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec (Name, Size, Type, vsp)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Type;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Attributes;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate the appropriate PSECT flags given the PSECT type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcmp (Type, "COMMON") == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Common block psects are: PIC,OVR,REL,GBL,SHR,RD,WRT
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC | GPS_S_M_OVR | GPS_S_M_REL | GPS_S_M_GBL |
|
|
|
|
|
GPS_S_M_SHR | GPS_S_M_RD | GPS_S_M_WRT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (strcmp (Type, "CONST") == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Common block psects are: PIC,OVR,REL,GBL,SHR,RD
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC | GPS_S_M_OVR | GPS_S_M_REL | GPS_S_M_GBL |
|
|
|
|
|
GPS_S_M_SHR | GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (strcmp (Type, "DATA") == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The Data psects are PIC,REL,RD,WRT
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes =
|
|
|
|
|
(GPS_S_M_PIC | GPS_S_M_REL | GPS_S_M_RD | GPS_S_M_WRT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (strcmp (Type, "TEXT") == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The Text psects are PIC,REL,SHR,EXE,RD
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes =
|
|
|
|
|
(GPS_S_M_PIC | GPS_S_M_REL | GPS_S_M_SHR |
|
|
|
|
|
GPS_S_M_EXE | GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Error: Unknown psect type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Unknown VMS psect type");
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Modify the psect attributes according to any attribute string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (Name, &Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for globalref/def/val.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALVALUE_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* globalvalue symbols were generated before. This code
|
|
|
|
|
* prevents unsightly psect buildup, and makes sure that
|
|
|
|
|
* fixup references are emitted correctly.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = -1; /* to catch errors */
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) = N_UNDF; /* make refs work */
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* decrement psect counter */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) = N_UNDF;
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* return and indicate no psect */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* In this case we still generate the psect */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Error_Line[256];
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (Error_Line, "Globalsymbol attribute for"
|
|
|
|
|
" symbol %s was unexpected.\n", Name);
|
|
|
|
|
error (Error_Line);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes &= 0xffff; /* clear out the globalref/def stuff */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a PSECT definition subrecord
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_PSC);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psects are always LONGWORD aligned
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (2);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Specify the psect attributes
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Specify the allocation
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Size);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the psect name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Given the pointer to a symbol we calculate how big the data at the
|
|
|
|
|
* symbol is. We do this by looking for the next symbol (local or
|
|
|
|
|
* global) which will indicate the start of another datum.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp, End_Of_Data)
|
|
|
|
|
register struct symbol *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int End_Of_Data;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct symbol *sp1, *Next_Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Find the next symbol
|
|
|
|
|
* it delimits this datum
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Next_Symbol = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp1 = symbol_rootP; sp1; sp1 = symbol_next (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The data type must match
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (sp1) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The symbol must be AFTER this symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_VALUE (sp1) <= S_GET_VALUE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We ignore THIS symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (sp1 == sp)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there is already a candidate selected for the
|
|
|
|
|
* next symbol, see if we are a better candidate
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Next_Symbol)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are a better candidate if we are "closer"
|
|
|
|
|
* to the symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_VALUE (sp1) >
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (Next_Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Win: Make this the candidate
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Next_Symbol = sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This is the 1st candidate
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Next_Symbol = sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Calculate its size
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
return (Next_Symbol ?
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_VALUE (Next_Symbol) -
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp)) :
|
|
|
|
|
(End_Of_Data - S_GET_VALUE (sp)));
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check symbol names for the Psect hack with a globalvalue, and then
|
|
|
|
|
* generate globalvalues for those that have it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Emit_Globalvalues (text_siz, data_siz, Data_Segment)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Data_Segment;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
char *stripped_name, *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Attributes;
|
|
|
|
|
int globalvalue;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbol table for globalvalues, and emit def/ref when
|
|
|
|
|
* required. These will be caught again later and converted to
|
|
|
|
|
* N_UNDF
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = sp->sy_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* See if this is something we want to look at.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp) != (N_DATA | N_EXT)) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp) != (N_UNDF | N_EXT)))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* See if this has globalvalue specification.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
stripped_name = (char *) malloc (strlen (Name) + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
strcpy (stripped_name, Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (stripped_name, &Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALVALUE_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, 0, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
Size = VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp, text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size > 4)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Invalid data type for globalvalue");
|
|
|
|
|
globalvalue = 0;
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
memcpy (&globalvalue, Data_Segment + S_GET_VALUE (sp) -
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz, Size);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Three times for good luck. The linker seems to get confused
|
|
|
|
|
if there are fewer than three */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, 0, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, globalvalue, 3);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, globalvalue, 3);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
printf (" Invalid globalvalue of %s\n", stripped_name);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
free (stripped_name); /* clean up */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a procedure entry pt/mask
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Procedure_Entry_Pt (Name, Psect_Number, Psect_Offset, Entry_Mask)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Entry_Mask;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a Procedure Entry Pt/Mask subrecord
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_EPM);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_EPMW);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Data type is undefined
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flags = "RELOCATABLE" and "DEFINED"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (GSY_S_M_DEF | GSY_S_M_REL);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psect Number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Psect_Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Entry mask
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Entry_Mask);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the global symbol name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the current location counter to a particular Psect and Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Psect_Index, Offset, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect base + Longword Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect_Index < 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set relocation base
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_SETRB);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store repeated immediate data in current Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Repeated_Data (Repeat_Count, Pointer, Size, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Repeat_Count;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore zero bytes/words/longwords
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Size == sizeof (char)) && (*Pointer == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Size == sizeof (short)) && (*(short *) Pointer == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Size == sizeof (long)) && (*(long *) Pointer == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the data is too big for a TIR_S_C_STO_RIVB sub-record
|
|
|
|
|
* then we do it manually
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size > 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
while (--Repeat_Count >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Pointer, Size, Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the repeat count
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_LW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Repeat_Count);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And now the command and its data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_RIVB);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Size);
|
|
|
|
|
while (--Size >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*Pointer++);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store a Position Independent Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (Symbol, Offset, PC_Relative,
|
|
|
|
|
Psect, Psect_Offset, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
struct symbol *Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int PC_Relative;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp =
|
|
|
|
|
(struct VMS_Symbol *) (Symbol->sy_number);
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set to the appropriate offset in the Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (PC_Relative)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* For a Code reference we need to fix the operand
|
|
|
|
|
* specifier as well (so back up 1 byte)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Psect, Psect_Offset - 1, Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* For a Data reference we just store HERE
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Psect, Psect_Offset, Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make sure we are still generating a "Record Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on symbol type (so we can stack its value)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the symbol name (case hacked)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (S_GET_NAME (Symbol), Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the global symbol value
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_GBL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the longword offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_LW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Add the two, leaving the result on the stack
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_OPR_ADD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Uninitialized local data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_BSS:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp->Psect_Index < 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (vsp->Psect_Offset + Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local text
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp->Psect_Index < 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (S_GET_VALUE (Symbol) + Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialized local or global data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA:
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp->Psect_Index < 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (vsp->Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (vsp->Psect_Offset + Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store either a code or data reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (PC_Relative ? TIR_S_C_STO_PICR : TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset >
|
|
|
|
|
(sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check in the text area for an indirect pc-relative reference
|
|
|
|
|
* and fix it up with addressing mode 0xff [PC indirect]
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* THIS SHOULD BE REPLACED BY THE USE OF TIR_S_C_STO_PIRR IN THE
|
|
|
|
|
* PIC CODE GENERATING FIXUP ROUTINE.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Fix_Indirect_Reference (Text_Psect, Offset, fragP, text_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *text_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The addressing mode byte is 1 byte before the address
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Offset--;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is it in THIS frag??
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Offset < fragP->fr_address) ||
|
|
|
|
|
(Offset >= (fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix)))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to search for the fragment containing this
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = text_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Offset >= fragP->fr_address) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(Offset < (fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix)))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we couldn't find the frag, things are BAD!!
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Couldn't find fixup fragment when checking for indirect reference");
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for indirect PC relative addressing mode
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_literal[Offset - fragP->fr_address] == (char) 0xff)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
static char Address_Mode = 0xff;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Store the indirect mode back into the image
|
|
|
|
|
* to fix up the damage done by STO_PICR
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect, Offset, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (&Address_Mode, 1, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This is a hacked _doprnt() for VAX-11 "C". It understands that
|
|
|
|
|
* it is ONLY called by as_fatal(Format, Args) with a pointer to the
|
|
|
|
|
* "Args" argument. From this we can make it all work right!
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#if !defined(eunice) && defined(HO_VMS)
|
|
|
|
|
_doprnt (Format, a, f)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Format;
|
|
|
|
|
FILE *f;
|
|
|
|
|
char **a;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int Nargs = ((int *) a)[-2]; /* This understands as_fatal() */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
switch (Nargs)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, "_doprnt error on \"%s\"!!", Format);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 1:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 2:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 3:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 4:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 5:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 6:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 7:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 8:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 9:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6], a[7]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 10:
|
|
|
|
|
fprintf (f, Format, a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6], a[7], a[8]);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* eunice */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the procedure "main()" exists we have to add the instruction
|
|
|
|
|
* "jsb c$main_args" at the beginning to be compatible with VAX-11 "C".
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Check_For_Main ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP /* JF */
|
|
|
|
|
register struct frchain *frchainP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS **prev_fragPP;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct fix *fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = (struct symbol *) symbol_find ("_main");
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP && !S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) &&
|
|
|
|
|
S_IS_EXTERNAL (symbolP) && (S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP
|
|
|
|
|
if (!flagseen['+'])
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Remember the entry point symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Point_Symbol = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan all the fragment chains for the one with "_main"
|
|
|
|
|
* (Actually we know the fragment from the symbol, but we need
|
|
|
|
|
* the previous fragment so we can change its pointer)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = frchain_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (frchainP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan all the fragments in this chain, remembering
|
|
|
|
|
* the "previous fragment"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
prev_fragPP = &frchainP->frch_root;
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = frchainP->frch_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (fragP && (fragP != frchainP->frch_last))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is this the fragment?
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == symbolP->sy_frag)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Modify the fragment by replacing
|
|
|
|
|
* it with a new fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag = (fragS *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*New_Frag) +
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix +
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_var +
|
|
|
|
|
5);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The fragments are the same except
|
|
|
|
|
* that the "fixed" area is larger
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*New_Frag = *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_fix += 6;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Copy the literal data opening a hole
|
|
|
|
|
* 2 bytes after "_main" (i.e. just after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask). Into which we place
|
|
|
|
|
* the JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[0] = fragP->fr_literal[0];
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[1] = fragP->fr_literal[1];
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[2] = 0x16; /* Jsb */
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[3] = 0xef;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[4] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[5] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[6] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[7] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 2; i < fragP->fr_fix + fragP->fr_var; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[i + 6] =
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_literal[i];
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now replace the old fragment with the
|
|
|
|
|
* newly generated one.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*prev_fragPP = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Remember the entry point symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Point_Symbol = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the text area fixup structures
|
|
|
|
|
* as offsets in the fragment may have
|
|
|
|
|
* changed
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = text_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for references to this
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_frag == fragP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Change the fragment
|
|
|
|
|
* pointer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the offset is after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask we need
|
|
|
|
|
* to account for the JSB
|
|
|
|
|
* instruction we just
|
|
|
|
|
* inserted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_where >= 2)
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where += 6;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbols as offsets in the
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment may have changed
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for references to this
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP->sy_frag == fragP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Change the fragment
|
|
|
|
|
* pointer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the offset is after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask we need
|
|
|
|
|
* to account for the JSB
|
|
|
|
|
* instruction we just
|
|
|
|
|
* inserted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) >= 2)
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) += 6;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a symbol reference to
|
|
|
|
|
* "_c$main_args" so we can get
|
|
|
|
|
* its address inserted into the
|
|
|
|
|
* JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = (symbolS *) xmalloc (sizeof (*symbolP));
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (symbolP) = "_c$main_args";
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_TYPE (symbolP, N_UNDF);
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_OTHER (symbolP) = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_DESC (symbolP) = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_name_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_forward = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* this actually inserts at the beginning of the list */
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_append (symbol_rootP, symbolP, &symbol_rootP, &symbol_lastP);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_rootP = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate a text fixup structure
|
|
|
|
|
* to get "_c$main_args" stored into the
|
|
|
|
|
* JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
fixP = (struct fix *) xmalloc (sizeof (*fixP));
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_addsy = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_subsy = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size = sizeof (long);
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_next = text_fix_root;
|
|
|
|
|
text_fix_root = fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now make sure we exit from the loop
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Try the next fragment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
prev_fragPP = &fragP->fr_next;
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = fragP->fr_next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Try the next fragment chain
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (frchainP)
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = frchainP->frch_next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write a VAX/VMS object file (everything else has been done!)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_write_object_file (text_siz, data_siz, text_frag_root, data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *text_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *data_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct fix *fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Data_Segment;
|
|
|
|
|
int Local_Initialized_Data_Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Globalref;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Number = 0; /* Psect Index Number */
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect = -1; /* Text Psect Index */
|
|
|
|
|
int Data_Psect = -2; /* Data Psect Index JF: Was -1 */
|
|
|
|
|
int Bss_Psect = -3; /* Bss Psect Index JF: Was -1 */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Create the VMS object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Create_VMS_Object_File ();
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the module header records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_MHD_Records ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the Data segment:
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Since this is REALLY hard to do any other way,
|
|
|
|
|
* we actually manufacture the data segment and
|
|
|
|
|
* the store the appropriate values out of it.
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to generate this early, so that globalvalues
|
|
|
|
|
* can be properly emitted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (data_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Allocate the data segment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Segment = (char *) xmalloc (data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Run through the data fragments, filling in the segment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = data_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register long int count;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *fill_literal;
|
|
|
|
|
register long int fill_size;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
i = fragP->fr_address - text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_fix)
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (Data_Segment + i,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_literal,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix);
|
|
|
|
|
i += fragP->fr_fix;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
fill_literal = fragP->fr_literal + fragP->fr_fix;
|
|
|
|
|
fill_size = fragP->fr_var;
|
|
|
|
|
for (count = fragP->fr_offset; count; count--)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fill_size)
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (Data_Segment + i, fill_literal, fill_size);
|
|
|
|
|
i += fill_size;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate the VMS object file records
|
|
|
|
|
* 1st GSD then TIR records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Global Symbol Dictionary *******/
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Emit globalvalues now. We must do this before the text psect
|
|
|
|
|
* is defined, or we will get linker warnings about multiply defined
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols. All of the globalvalues "reference" psect 0, although
|
|
|
|
|
* it really does not have anything to do with it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Emit_Globalvalues (text_siz, data_siz, Data_Segment);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the Text Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$code", text_siz, "TEXT", 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the BSS Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (local_bss_counter > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Bss_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$uninitialized_data", local_bss_counter, "DATA",
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef gxx_bug_fixed
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
/*
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
* The g++ compiler does not write out external references to vtables
|
|
|
|
|
* correctly. Check for this and holler if we see it happening.
|
|
|
|
|
* If that compiler bug is ever fixed we can remove this.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
1995-05-30 05:05:38 +00:00
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
1993-11-03 00:56:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on symbol type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp)) {
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a GSD global symbol reference
|
|
|
|
|
* record.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (strncmp (S_GET_NAME (sp),"__vt.",5) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp) = N_UNDF | N_EXT;
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn("g++ wrote an extern reference to %s as a routine.",
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn("I will fix it, but I hope that it was not really a routine");
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* gxx_bug_fixed */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now scan the symbols and emit the appropriate GSD records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on symbol type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global uninitialized data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a VMS data symbol entry
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*vsp));
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_number = (int) vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make the psect for this data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_OTHER (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
"CONST",
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
"COMMON",
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Globalref)
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Place a global symbol at the
|
|
|
|
|
* beginning of the Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
1);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local uninitialized data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_BSS:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a VMS data symbol entry
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*vsp));
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Bss_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset =
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp) -
|
|
|
|
|
bss_address_frag.fr_address;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_number = (int) vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global initialized data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a VMS data symbol entry
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*vsp));
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp,
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_number = (int) vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make its psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_OTHER (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
"CONST",
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
"COMMON",
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Globalref)
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Place a global symbol at the
|
|
|
|
|
* beginning of the Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
1);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local initialized data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a VMS data symbol entry
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*vsp));
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size =
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp,
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Data_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset =
|
|
|
|
|
Local_Initialized_Data_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Local_Initialized_Data_Size += vsp->Size;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_number = (int) vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global Text definition
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned short Entry_Mask;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the entry mask
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = sp->sy_frag;
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Mask = (fragP->fr_literal[0] & 0xff) +
|
|
|
|
|
((fragP->fr_literal[1] & 0xff)
|
|
|
|
|
<< 8);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the Procedure entry pt.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Procedure_Entry_Pt (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Mask);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local Text definition
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a VMS data symbol entry
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Text_Psect != -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*vsp));
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_number = (int) vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a GSD global symbol reference
|
|
|
|
|
* record.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Anything else
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
* Including .stabs emitted by g++
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp) || (S_GET_TYPE (sp) == 22))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Error
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (sp) != 22)
|
|
|
|
|
printf (" ERROR, unknown type (%d)\n",
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_TYPE (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the Data Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((data_siz > 0) && (Local_Initialized_Data_Size > 0))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do it
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$data",
|
|
|
|
|
Local_Initialized_Data_Size,
|
|
|
|
|
"DATA", 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the VMS symbols and fill in the data psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Only look for undefined psects
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp->Psect_Index < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And only initialized data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == N_DATA) && !S_IS_EXTERNAL (vsp->Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Data_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Text Information and Relocation Records *******/
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the text segment data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (text_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the text fragments
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = text_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stop if we get to the data fragments
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore fragments with no data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((fragP->fr_fix == 0) && (fragP->fr_var == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Go the the appropriate offset in the
|
|
|
|
|
* Text Psect.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect, fragP->fr_address, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the "fixed" part
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_fix)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (fragP->fr_literal,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the "variable" part
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_var && fragP->fr_offset)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Repeated_Data (fragP->fr_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_literal +
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_var,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we go through the text segment fixups and
|
|
|
|
|
* generate TIR records to fix up addresses within
|
|
|
|
|
* the Text Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = text_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We DO handle the case of "Symbol - Symbol" as
|
|
|
|
|
* long as it is in the same segment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_subsy && fixP->fx_addsy)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* They need to be in the same segment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_subsy) !=
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data addsy and subsy didn't have the same type");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And they need to be in one that we
|
|
|
|
|
* can check the psect on
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_DATA) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data addsy and subsy didn't have an appropriate type");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This had better not be PC relative!
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data was erroneously \"pcrel\"");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Subtract their values to get the
|
|
|
|
|
* difference.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_addsy) -
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_subsy);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now generate the fixup object records
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the psect and store the data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (&i,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size will HAVE to be "long"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_size != sizeof (long))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup datum was not a longword");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Symbol must be "added" (if it is ever
|
|
|
|
|
* subtracted we can
|
|
|
|
|
* fix this assumption)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_addsy == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup datum was not \"fixP->fx_addsy\"");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the symbol value in a PIC fashion
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (fixP->fx_addsy,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for indirect address reference,
|
|
|
|
|
* which has to be fixed up (as the linker
|
|
|
|
|
* will screw it up with TIR_S_C_STO_PICR).
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Fix_Indirect_Reference (Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag,
|
|
|
|
|
text_frag_root);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the Data segment:
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Since this is REALLY hard to do any other way,
|
|
|
|
|
* we actually manufacture the data segment and
|
|
|
|
|
* the store the appropriate values out of it.
|
|
|
|
|
* The segment was manufactured before, now we just
|
|
|
|
|
* dump it into the appropriate psects.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (data_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we can run through all the data symbols
|
|
|
|
|
* and store the data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore anything other than data symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the Psect + Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Data_Segment +
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (vsp->Symbol) -
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we go through the data segment fixups and
|
|
|
|
|
* generate TIR records to fix up addresses within
|
|
|
|
|
* the Data Psects
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = data_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Find the symbol for the containing datum
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Only bother with Data symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
sp = vsp->Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (sp) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore symbol if After fixup
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_VALUE (sp) >
|
|
|
|
|
(fixP->fx_where +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* See if the datum is here
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_VALUE (sp) + vsp->Size) <=
|
|
|
|
|
(fixP->fx_where +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We DO handle the case of "Symbol - Symbol" as
|
|
|
|
|
* long as it is in the same segment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_subsy && fixP->fx_addsy)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* They need to be in the same segment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_subsy) !=
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data addsy and subsy didn't have the same type");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And they need to be in one that we
|
|
|
|
|
* can check the psect on
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_DATA) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data addsy and subsy didn't have an appropriate type");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This had better not be PC relative!
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup data was erroneously \"pcrel\"");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Subtract their values to get the
|
|
|
|
|
* difference.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_addsy) -
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_subsy);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now generate the fixup object records
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the psect and store the data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where -
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (vsp->Symbol) +
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (&i,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Size will HAVE to be "long"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_size != sizeof (long))
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup datum was not a longword");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Symbol must be "added" (if it is ever
|
|
|
|
|
* subtracted we can
|
|
|
|
|
* fix this assumption)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_addsy == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error ("Fixup datum was not \"fixP->fx_addsy\"");
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the symbol value in a PIC fashion
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_addsy,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag->fr_address +
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where -
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (vsp->Symbol) +
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback Begin Module record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_Begin ();
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbols and write out the routines
|
|
|
|
|
* (this makes the assumption that symbols are in
|
|
|
|
|
* order of ascending text segment offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct symbol *Current_Routine = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Current_Line_Number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Current_Offset = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *Current_File;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Output debugging info for global variables and static variables that are not
|
|
|
|
|
* specific to one routine. We also need to examine all stabs directives, to
|
|
|
|
|
* find the definitions to all of the advanced data types, and this is done by
|
|
|
|
|
* VMS_LSYM_Parse. This needs to be done before any definitions are output to
|
|
|
|
|
* the object file, since there can be forward references in the stabs
|
|
|
|
|
* directives. When through with parsing, the text of the stabs directive
|
|
|
|
|
* is altered, with the definitions removed, so that later passes will see
|
|
|
|
|
* directives as they would be written if the type were already defined.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* We also look for files and include files, and make a list of them. We
|
|
|
|
|
* examine the source file numbers to establish the actual lines that code was
|
|
|
|
|
* generated from, and then generate offsets.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LSYM_Parse ();
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch ((unsigned char) S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_DESC (symbolP) > Current_File->max_line)
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->max_line = S_GET_DESC (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_DESC (symbolP) < Current_File->min_line)
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->min_line = S_GET_DESC (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SO:
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->flag = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->min_line = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SOL:
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_GSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_GSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LCSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LCSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_FUN: /* For static constant symbols */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_STSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_STSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* now we take a quick sweep through the files and assign offsets
|
|
|
|
|
to each one. This will essentially be the starting line number to the
|
|
|
|
|
debugger for each file. Output the info for the debugger to specify the
|
|
|
|
|
files, and then tell it how many lines to use */
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int File_Number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Debugger_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int file_available;
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File = file_root;
|
|
|
|
|
for (Current_File = file_root; Current_File; Current_File = Current_File->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_File == (struct input_file *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_File->max_line == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((strncmp (Current_File->name, "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", 16) == 0) &&
|
|
|
|
|
!flagseen['D'])
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((strncmp (Current_File->name, "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", 15) == 0) &&
|
|
|
|
|
!flagseen['D'])
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* show a few extra lines at the start of the region selected */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_File->min_line > 2)
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->min_line -= 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->offset = Debugger_Offset - Current_File->min_line + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Debugger_Offset += Current_File->max_line - Current_File->min_line + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_File->same_file_fpnt != (struct input_file *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->file_number = Current_File->same_file_fpnt->file_number;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->file_number = ++File_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
file_available = VMS_TBT_Source_File (Current_File->name,
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->file_number);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!file_available)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->file_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
File_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_Lines (Current_File->file_number,
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->min_line,
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File->max_line - Current_File->min_line + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* scope */
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with text symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) && (S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore symbols starting with "L",
|
|
|
|
|
* as they are local symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*S_GET_NAME (symbolP) == 'L')
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there is a routine start defined,
|
|
|
|
|
* terminate it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Routine)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* End the routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (text_siz, Current_Routine);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the routine begin traceback info
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Text_Psect != -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_Begin (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Routine = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Output local symbols, i.e. all symbols that are associated with a specific
|
|
|
|
|
* routine. We output them now so the debugger recognizes them as local to
|
|
|
|
|
* this routine.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP1 = Current_Routine; symbolP1; symbolP1 = symbol_next (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP1))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP1) != N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = S_GET_NAME (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = S_GET_NAME (symbolP1);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt++ != '_')
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt++ == *pnt1++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt1 != 'F' && *pnt1 != 'f') continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*(--pnt) == '\0') && (*(--pnt1) == ':'))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP1 != (symbolS *) NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_Define_Routine (symbolP1, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* local symbol block */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch ((unsigned char) S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Offset the line into the correct portion
|
|
|
|
|
* of the file */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_File->file_number == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Sometimes the same offset gets several source
|
|
|
|
|
* lines assigned to it.
|
|
|
|
|
* We should be selective about which lines
|
|
|
|
|
* we allow, we should prefer lines that are
|
|
|
|
|
* in the main source file when debugging
|
|
|
|
|
* inline functions. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Current_File->file_number != 1) &&
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) ==
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* calculate actual debugger source line */
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_DESC (symbolP)
|
|
|
|
|
+= Current_File->offset;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If this is the 1st N_SLINE, setup
|
|
|
|
|
* PC/Line correlation. Otherwise
|
|
|
|
|
* do the delta PC/Line. If the offset
|
|
|
|
|
* for the line number is not +ve we need
|
|
|
|
|
* to do another PC/Line correlation
|
|
|
|
|
* setup
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Offset == -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_DESC (symbolP),
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP),
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_DESC (symbolP) -
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Line_Number) <= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line delta is not +ve, we
|
|
|
|
|
* need to close the line and
|
|
|
|
|
* start a new PC/Line
|
|
|
|
|
* correlation.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (0,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) -
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
-1);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_DESC (symbolP),
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP),
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line delta is +ve, all is well
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_DESC (symbolP) -
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Line_Number,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) -
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
1);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Update the current line/PC
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Line_Number = S_GET_DESC (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Source file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SO:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Remember that we had a source file
|
|
|
|
|
* and emit the source file debugger
|
|
|
|
|
* record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File =
|
|
|
|
|
find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* We need to make sure that we are really in the actual source file when
|
|
|
|
|
* we compute the maximum line number. Otherwise the debugger gets really
|
|
|
|
|
* confused */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SOL:
|
|
|
|
|
Current_File =
|
|
|
|
|
find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there is a routine start defined,
|
|
|
|
|
* terminate it (and the line numbers)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Routine)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Terminate the line numbers
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (0,
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz - S_GET_VALUE (Current_Routine),
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
-1);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Terminate the routine
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (text_siz, Current_Routine);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the Traceback End Module TBT record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_End ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the End Of Module record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Entry_Point_Symbol == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (-1, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (Entry_Point_Symbol));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* All done, close the object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Close_VMS_Object_File ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* end of obj-vms.c */
|